Public
ITM208 ndash Activate SAP Solution Manager 71
SOLAR Content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 2Public
Speakers
Bangalore October 5 - 7
Wulff-Heinrich Knapp
Las Vegas Sept 19 - 23
Tim Steuer
Barcelona Nov 8 - 10
Sinje Seidler
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 3Public
Disclaimer
The information in this presentation is confidential and proprietary to SAP and may not be disclosed without the permission of
SAP Except for your obligation to protect confidential information this presentation is not subject to your license agreement or
any other service or subscription agreement with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this
presentation or any related document or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein
This presentation or any related document and SAPs strategy and possible future developments products and or platforms
directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time for any reason without notice
The information in this presentation is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality
This presentation is provided without a warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied
warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement This presentation is for informational
purposes and may not be incorporated into a contract SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this
presentation except if such damages were caused by SAPrsquos intentional or gross negligence
All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially
from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only
as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 4Public
Agenda
bull SAP Solution Manager 72
bull Where does the content go
bull Get ready today
bull Activate
bull Available services
Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture
State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72
covers the whole lifecycle of a solution
DesignTo-be processes amp
requirements
BuildAgile requirements
fulfillment
RunContinuous improvement
based on real usageDigital
Transformation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 2Public
Speakers
Bangalore October 5 - 7
Wulff-Heinrich Knapp
Las Vegas Sept 19 - 23
Tim Steuer
Barcelona Nov 8 - 10
Sinje Seidler
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 3Public
Disclaimer
The information in this presentation is confidential and proprietary to SAP and may not be disclosed without the permission of
SAP Except for your obligation to protect confidential information this presentation is not subject to your license agreement or
any other service or subscription agreement with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this
presentation or any related document or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein
This presentation or any related document and SAPs strategy and possible future developments products and or platforms
directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time for any reason without notice
The information in this presentation is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality
This presentation is provided without a warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied
warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement This presentation is for informational
purposes and may not be incorporated into a contract SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this
presentation except if such damages were caused by SAPrsquos intentional or gross negligence
All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially
from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only
as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 4Public
Agenda
bull SAP Solution Manager 72
bull Where does the content go
bull Get ready today
bull Activate
bull Available services
Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture
State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72
covers the whole lifecycle of a solution
DesignTo-be processes amp
requirements
BuildAgile requirements
fulfillment
RunContinuous improvement
based on real usageDigital
Transformation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 3Public
Disclaimer
The information in this presentation is confidential and proprietary to SAP and may not be disclosed without the permission of
SAP Except for your obligation to protect confidential information this presentation is not subject to your license agreement or
any other service or subscription agreement with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this
presentation or any related document or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein
This presentation or any related document and SAPs strategy and possible future developments products and or platforms
directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time for any reason without notice
The information in this presentation is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality
This presentation is provided without a warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied
warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement This presentation is for informational
purposes and may not be incorporated into a contract SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this
presentation except if such damages were caused by SAPrsquos intentional or gross negligence
All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially
from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only
as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 4Public
Agenda
bull SAP Solution Manager 72
bull Where does the content go
bull Get ready today
bull Activate
bull Available services
Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture
State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72
covers the whole lifecycle of a solution
DesignTo-be processes amp
requirements
BuildAgile requirements
fulfillment
RunContinuous improvement
based on real usageDigital
Transformation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 4Public
Agenda
bull SAP Solution Manager 72
bull Where does the content go
bull Get ready today
bull Activate
bull Available services
Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture
State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72
covers the whole lifecycle of a solution
DesignTo-be processes amp
requirements
BuildAgile requirements
fulfillment
RunContinuous improvement
based on real usageDigital
Transformation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture
State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72
covers the whole lifecycle of a solution
DesignTo-be processes amp
requirements
BuildAgile requirements
fulfillment
RunContinuous improvement
based on real usageDigital
Transformation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture
State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72
covers the whole lifecycle of a solution
DesignTo-be processes amp
requirements
BuildAgile requirements
fulfillment
RunContinuous improvement
based on real usageDigital
Transformation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public
SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation
Launchpad Apps
and Dashboards
Transparent
requirements to deploy
On-Premise Hybrid
and Cloud Solutions
SAP Solution Manager
on SAP HANA
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
One Process Landscape
for Business and IT
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture
State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72
covers the whole lifecycle of a solution
DesignTo-be processes amp
requirements
BuildAgile requirements
fulfillment
RunContinuous improvement
based on real usageDigital
Transformation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture
State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72
covers the whole lifecycle of a solution
DesignTo-be processes amp
requirements
BuildAgile requirements
fulfillment
RunContinuous improvement
based on real usageDigital
Transformation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager solution documentation
Web-based documentation experience
Integrated BPMN process editor
Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)
Processes assembled from re-use libraries
Processes are validated and optimized continuously
based on real usage
Integrated process experience
Requirements Management
IT Project and Portfolio Management integration
Change and Request Management integration
Test Management integration
Business Process Monitoring integration
Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with
IT solution documentation across build and run
Integrated graphical BPMN process editor
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application
See the status of the last data collection for your
business processes in a simplified tabular display
optionally per step or interface
In addition you can see a graphical
representation of your business process flow
This makes use of the new process graphic from
the solution documentation
From both screens you can navigate to the details
of the collected metrics (eg last measured value
or detail list)
Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public
Process Management
Demo
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
Public
Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public
One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo
Process Content
The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications
and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution
documentation one of which is the production version
Project
IT project management with a full project management
suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes
Well-defined
transition of entities
SOLAR
Project
amp
Solution
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public
Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation
SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01
System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM
Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC
Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc
2 Choose project
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public
I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Documentation tile
You can also access the solution documentation
directly via tcode SOLDOC
Process structure has links to elements such as
documents IMG objects test cases and transactions
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public
Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data
Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt
Project and Process Management -gt Solution
Administration tile
You can also access the solution administration
directly via tcode SOLADM
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
Public
Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public
SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule
H22015 H12016
Ramp-Up Go To Release
End
20172025
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public
What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling
bull Release Management
bull Project Management
Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized
user experience
bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases
Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract
bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP
HANA
bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA
Receive mainstream maintenance beyond
2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)
bull Technology updates (new databases and operating
systems)
Upgrade to new functionality
Upgrade to latest technology
Upgrade User Experience
Upgrade to new maintenance interval
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public
SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view
The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure
Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72
runs 2 single stacks
bull Split is done after upgrade
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public
Upgrade impact
Scenario Details of Impact Impact
Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low
IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of
landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low
Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low
Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No
architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium
Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content
activationMedium
Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium
Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be
adopted at own paceHigh
Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no
upgrade of existing Test Plans High
Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and
Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh
Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change
Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release
High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
Public
Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a free trial system
Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own
71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for
evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72
successAmazon Web Services charges apply
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager
I want to try out
content activation
before I upgrade
Version 72
customer content
upload possible
Activation on CAL
I want to try out SAP
Solution Manager 72
capabilities
Version 72
Simple demos +
SAP S4HANA
Packages
Demo on CAL
I want to jumpstart my
SAP S4HANA
implementation
Version 72 + SAP
S4HANA 1511 fully-
activated managed
system
Simple demos + SAP
S4HANA Packages
incl connected system
Jumpstart on CAL
I want to test drive
Focused capabilities on
SAP Solution Manager
Version 71
FS + pre-
configured + test
data
Focused Solutions
on CAL
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public
Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization
SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP
Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance
Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up
SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample
projects which customers can use for their evaluation and
activation efforts
SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges
Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to
test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free
trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost
SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public
Activation starts today
For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer
Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you
Decision support to plan and execute content activation
Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72
Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact
Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(13)
Keep your business process structure simple
The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash
ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best
practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt
scenariordquo
If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can
changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager
72
Assign executables on process step level
To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable
(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test
Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities
Executable variants
The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable
attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by
single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single
process steps during content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(23)
Deprecated SAP attributes
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no
longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can
convert them into customer attributes during content activation
Structure element attributes
Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR
Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords
Assignment attributes
Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant
Document attributes
Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test
Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public
Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today
(33)
Tag your copied projects
This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project
This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result
may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in
unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities
If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming
convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public
Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content
Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date
SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR
content (Component Repository content)
In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to
SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-
upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming
You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669
(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public
Clean up and organize
To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation
bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist
bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical
component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)
bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents
Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW
documents This step is optional to free up database space
Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated
They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report
SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents
Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public
Collect information amp plan the activation
Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions
The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution
Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The
information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be
downloaded via SAP Note 2161244
Prepare the content activation in advance
The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the
activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your
company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP
Solution Manager 71 system
PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public
Tool Cross-project solutions overview report
The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing
projects
The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information
bull Is process documentation included
bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)
bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)
bull Number of structure elements
bull Number of assignments on the tabs
bull Last change date of a structure element
bull Last change date of a document
How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public
Project solutions overview report sample report result
The report provides various
information on all projects and
solutions of your SAP Solution
Manager 71 system
The main purpose is to support
the decision process if a project
solution has to be included in the
scope for content activation or not
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public
Landscape Scenarios Overview
In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept
has been completely overhauled
The following Best Practices show how the new Logical
Component Groups should be modeled depending on the
general setup of your system landscape
Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of
further landscape scenarios
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public
New concept Logical Component Groups
Logical Component Group
bull describes a group of systems which belong together
bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape
Logical Component Group (ie ERP)
Logical Component
(ie Development)
Logical Component
(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD
DEV TST
Example
The example shows a dual-track landscape with a
maintenance track and a development track
The maintenance track supports the productive system
while the development track is used for preparing a new
release
In a single-track landscape the logical component group
would comprise only one logical component
Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)
bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management
bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
ldquoA logical component refers to the
concrete technical systems of a
system track typically belonging to
the same transport landscape and
having the same product version
The technical systems assigned to
logical components are classified
according to their system role eg
development system quality
assurance systemrdquo
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public
SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)
Development Systems
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Logical Component Group ERP
Logical Component Production
Logical Component Maintenance
Logical Component Development
Logical Component Design
Maintenance Systems
Production Systems
Sandbox Systems
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public
Best-Practice Approach for
Branch Setup of Solution Documentation
Production
PRD
Maintenance
DEV amp QAS
Development
DEV amp QAS
Design
Sandbox
Import
Sandbox
= Change Request Management controlled
As-is solution
To-be solution
Fix amp Enhance Innovate
System SBX-100
Role Sandbox
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DD1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS02
System QD1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS02
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS02
System DM1-100
Role Development
Version S4HANA FPS01
System QM1-100
Role Quality Assurance
Version S4HANA FPS01
System PP1-100
Role Production
Version S4HANA FPS01
Cut-over
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
Public
ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
Public
DemoPrepare activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public
Entry screen
After calling transaction
PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry
screen describes the details of the
following guided procedure
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public
Step 1 Scope of Content Activation
In the first step you need to select
the projects and solutions which you
want to take over into the new
solution documentation environment
Additionally you need to choose if
you want to take over additional
content for related applications
(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public
Step 1 Consistency check
Before going to the next step there is
a consistency check You will be
informed about potential issues or
problems which should be solved
during the preparation phase This
will reduce risks in the activation
phase later on
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public
Step 2 System landscape for 72
Step 2 provides a proposal for the
newly created logical component
groups This is based on the logical
components from the selection of
projects and solutions from step 1
and based on data from your system
landscape
In this step you should rename the
groups to a more meaningful name
You also assign for which solution
the logical component group is
assigned
You can also move logical
components between groups
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public
Step 3 Target branches and remote sources
In step 3 you need to decide for
every scoped project and solution to
which branch the content of the
respective project should be moved
You also need to make that decision
for other elements like Test Cases
and Technical Objects
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public
Step 3 Consistency check
Before step 4 there is another
consistency check to help you
identifying potential risks for the
activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public
Step 4 Summary
Step 4 shows a summary of your
activities
Until you push the button ldquoClose
Preparationrdquo in this step you move
back and forth between the steps to
change your settings
After closing the preparation no
changes are possible anymore
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
Public
DemoExecute activation
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public
Enter SOLMAN_SETUP
After calling transaction
SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the
guided procedure for content activation
by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation
Content Activationrdquo
The guided procedure will open in a new
browser window
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public
Step 1 Get started
In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites
for the content activation procedure are
met
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public
Step 2 Activate content
In step 2 the content activation activities
are executed automatically
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public
Step 3 Close activation
In step 3 you finish the content
activation procedure Afterwards you
are ready to work with your content
that has been transferred to the new
solution documentation environment
in SAP Solution Manager 72
Important remark This action can
not be reverted and you cannot
change anything in the guided
procedure after closing it
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
Public
Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public
SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations
Accelerated innovation
enablement
Best practices
Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation
Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy
Expert-guided implementation
Meet-the-expert sessions
QuickIQs
Guided self-services
Value maps
The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert
content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation
DIGITAL
BUSINESS
SAP S4HANA
Digital Industries
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public
Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products
GA Ramp Up
Meet the
Expert
Best Practices
in Upgrading
71 72
Dec 2015 Jan 2016
Guided
Discovery
Tutorial (GDT)
Experience 72
comparison and
simulation
Summer 2016
EGI
1 Upgrade to 72
2 Content Activation
Full Portfolio
EGI for 72
Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices
Class Room
Training 72
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public
Current GDT Overview
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public
Solution
Documentation amp
Implementation
EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72
FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp
Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory
Available
SAP Solution Manager
Roadmap
Basic Configuration of
SAP Solution Manager
Roles amp Authorization
Concept
Solution Documentation
I Basic Initial Upload
Verification
Solution Documentation
II Reverse Process
Documentation
Solution Implementation
Setup Remote Support
Component (SAP
Business-Objects BI 3)
SAP Solution Manager
configuration for SAP
Business Objects BI 4
Change Control
Management
Change Control
Management I CTS+
Change Control
Management II Quality
Gate Management
Change Control
Management III Change
Request Management
Incident and
Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management
Incident and Problem
Management for VARs
Maintenance
Optimization amp
Security
Configuration Validation
Custom Development
Management Cockpit
Business Process
Operations
Business Process
Monitoring amp
Stabilization
Job Scheduling
Management
Application
Operations
System Monitoring amp
Reporting
End-User Experience
Monitoring Reporting
Analytics
Data Volume
Management
Methodology and
Infrastructure
Business Intelligence
Monitoring and
Troubleshooting
Integration Monitoring
SAP HANA Monitoring
and Troubleshooting
Test
Management
Test Management I
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management II
Business Process
Change Analyzer
Test Management IV
Component Based Test
Automation (CBTA)
E2E Root Cause
Analysis
Scope and Effort
Analyzer
ALM Jump Start
Guided Procedures
SAP IT Infrastructure
Management
Available
Content Activation 72
In development
Technical Upgrade 72
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public
Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72
E2E120
System Monitoring
E2E100=gtE2E110
Application Operations
E2E300 Business
Process Integration and
Automation
SMI310=gt E2E600
Implementation Projects
Solution Documentation amp
Implementation
E2E200 Change Control
Management
E2E220
Test Management Change Test amp
Release Management
Business Process
Operations
Application
Operations
Incident Problem amp
Request Management
Portfolio amp Project
Management
E2
E0
40
Ma
na
ge
Dig
ita
l Tra
ns
form
ati
on
w
ith
SA
P S
4
HA
NA
wit
h
SA
P S
olu
tio
n M
an
ag
er
SM250 Setup ITSM
SM100 Operations and
Configuration
How to Configure How to Use
SM255 Setup Change
Management
Planned
Services
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public
Content Activation Guide
To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended
to carefully read the Content Activation guide
This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for
Content Activation scenarios
You can download the latest version of the guide here
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public
Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72
Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300
when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution
Manager 72
This note provides comprehensive information
on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution
Manager Master Guide
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public
Further information on SAP Solution Manager
General overview
httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager
Focused solutions overview
httpsupportsapcomfocused
Documentation
httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72
Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials
httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager
SCN
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home
Discussions
httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
Prepare today
httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation
Technical info
httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public
SAP TechEd Online
Continue your SAP TechEd
education after the event
Access replays of
Keynotes
Demo Jam
SAP TechEd live interviews
Select lecture sessions
Hands-on sessions
hellip
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public
Further information
Related SAP TechEd sessions
IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72
ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72
ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library
ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA
ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements
TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond
SAP Public Web
httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager
httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml
httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml
SAP Education and Certification Opportunities
wwwsapcomeducation
Watch SAP TechEd Online
wwwsaptechedcomonline
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public
Please complete your
session evaluation for
ITM208
Contact information
Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom
Feedback
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public
copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate
company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors
National product specifications may vary
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its
affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty
In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop
or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future
developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time
for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-
looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place
undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions